راهنمای محصول

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsCamcordersSAMSUNG PL121

یﺎﻫ ﻞﻤﻌﻟﺍﺭﻮﺘﺳﺩ ﻞﻣﺎﺷ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ

ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ ًﺎ ﻔ ﻄ ﻟ .ﺖﺳﺍ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﺍ ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ ﺡﻭﺮﺸﻣ

.ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺖﻗﺩ ﻪﺑ ﺍﺭ ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

ﯽﺗﺎﻣﺪﻘﻣ ﻝﺎﮑﺷﺍ ﻊﻓﺭ

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻉﺎﺟﺭﺍ

ﺐﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

ﻪﻴﻟﻭﺍ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

ﻪﺘﻓﺮﺸﻴﭘ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

یﺭﺍﺩﺮﺑﺮﻳﻮﺼﺗ یﺎﻫ ﻪﻨﻳﺰﮔ

ﺶﻳﺍﺮﻳﻭ/ﺶﺨﭘ

ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻈﻨﺗ

ﺎﻫ ﺖﺳﻮﻴﭘ

ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

User Manual

PL120/PL121

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ ﮏﯿﻠﮐ ﺕﺎﻋﻮﺿﻮﻣ ﺯﺍ ﯽﮑﯾ یﻭﺭ

Summary of content (126 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ— ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ ،AC‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﮐﻠﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Apple Corporation‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ™microSD‬ﻭ ‪ ™microSDHC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪SD‬‬ ‫‪ Association‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫] [‬ ‫) (‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫←‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵١‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺒ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ◄ ‪٣۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ◄ ‪۴٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ◄ ‪۴۴‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺰی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ◄ ‪۵١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ◄ ‪۵۶‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ,‬ﺷﺐ‪ ,‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ◄ ‪٣۴‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ◄ ‪۵١‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ◄ ‪۵٢‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺍﮐﺸﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ◄ ‪٣۴‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ◄ ‪
PAGE 10
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪٣١ .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣٢ ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣۴ ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪٣۴ .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣۵ ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ ‪٣۶ .....
PAGE 11
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٧ ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪۴٨ ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪۴٨ .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٩ ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۵٠ .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ‪۵١ ................
PAGE 12
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪٩۴ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٩۵ ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٩۵ ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٩۶ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ‪٩۶ .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٩٧ .................
PAGE 13
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A / V‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪/‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫• ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫• ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳ
PAGE 17
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺭﻡ‬ ‫‪ Samsung‬ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٨‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Language‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪[t‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ]‪ [F] ،[c] ،[D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ ،[t‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ [o] .‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻮﺩک ﺭﺍ ﺟﻠﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۴‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 27
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪spS‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪(DIS‬‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ‪ DIS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ DIS :‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ DIS :‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮی ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ‬‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ S‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ← s‬ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭی‪ :‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ← s‬ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ AUTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [M] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴٧‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ 1280 X 720‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ 1280 X 720‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ MJPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪spS‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺵ‬ ‫‪spS‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪spS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﭙﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﭙﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ١۶ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪ :1984 X 1488‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪vspS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭی‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪spS‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪vp‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪vp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ← ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﮥ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪(My Star‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪vp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ً‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ« )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬ ‫‪vp‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ VGA‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )‪ ۶‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ؛ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪vp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :1‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :2‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :3‬ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ‪ RGB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ← ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ‪My Star‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪٧٣.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )‪ ٩‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪] .
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫]‪ ،[D] ،[c] ،[D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ← ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ]‪ [o‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ :‬ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ :1‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ١‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ‪ RGB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ← ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Intelli-‬‬ ‫‪ studio‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬ ‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ Help Help‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Web Support Update Intelli-studio Start Update‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Flickr‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (YouTube‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪My Computer Removable Disk ،‬‬ ‫‪ DCIM 100PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (S‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ← ‪ ← USB‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﭙﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 97
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .
PAGE 98
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ :‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﮔﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ,‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﮥ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪/‬ﺩی ﻭی ﺩی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،p‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،14M‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪) "١⁄٢/٣‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ٧/٧۶‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ‪CCD‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١۴/٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١۴/۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ‪ ۴/٧-٢٣/۵ = Samsung f‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ٢۶-١٣٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪F-stop‬‬ ‫‪) F۵/٩‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ‪) F٣/٣ -‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ١/٠X :‬ﺗﺎ ‪۵/٠X‬‬ ‫)ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ x‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪(٢۵/٠ :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ١/٠X :‬ﺗﺎ ‪١٣/۵X‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪TFT LC
PAGE 115
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ٠/٢ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣/۴‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻪ‪ ١/٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٩‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(DIS‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(DIS‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎ
PAGE 116
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ*‬ ‫*ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،ACB ،‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪،‬‬
PAGE 117
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪USB 2.
PAGE 118
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) EV‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ CCFL‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ LED‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ )‪(Vignetting‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی )ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑﯽ(‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 123
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫پ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪١۴ USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺵ ‪۴۴‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪۶۴‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪١٠١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪٩٧‬‬ ‫‪٩٢ Mac‬‬ ‫‪٨٧ Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٠‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١۴‬‬ ‫‪٩٢ Mac‬‬ ‫‪٨٧ Windows‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺎﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ‪٨۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٠٧‬‬ ‫ﺩ
PAGE 124
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۴١‬‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣۵‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ‪٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪٢۶‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣۴‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪٩٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪١۴ A/V‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۴٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٩۶‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪٣۴‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪۶۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪۶۴‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪۶۴‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ
PAGE 125
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ی‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪٢٨ (DIS‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵١‬‬ ‫ک‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٠۵‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺯﺩﻥ ‪١۶‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪(AEB‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۴٩‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٧٩‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧
PAGE 126
‫برای اطالع از خدمات پس از فروش يا يافتن پاسخ پرسش های خود در اين زمينه‪ ،‬لطفاً به‬ ‫ضمانت نامه ای که همراه محصول عرضه شده مراجعه نماييد يا به پايگاه اينترنتی‬ ‫‪ /http://www.samsung.com‬برويد‪.